Table Of Contents
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
DLP-G396 Change the ADM-10G Card Interlink Port Settings
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET Payloads
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Layer 2 Protection Settings
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ports
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Quality of Service Settings
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP QinQ Settings
DLP-G385 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP MAC Filter Settings
DLP-G386 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G387 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP RMON Thresholds
DLP-G389 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Optical Transport Network Settings
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update when the Card is part of a Protection Group
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This chapter explains how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP and 10GE_XP), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must be performed before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and create circuits.
Note 
Unless otherwise specified, "ONS 15454" refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a scheduled maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules—Complete this procedure to provision a multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards that will be protected with Y-cable protection.
3. G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
4. G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards.
5. G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
6. G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards.
7. G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
8. G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
9. G165 Modify the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards.
10. G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.
11. G192 Force FPGA Update—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
12. G196 Force FPGA Update when the Card is part of a Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards when the card is part of a protection group.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Purpose
|
Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate PPM.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
DLP-G63 Install an SFP or XFP, page 3-59
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values can be changed after you install the PPM.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the "DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering" task as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the "DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, complete the "DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the "DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port" task. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Complete the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already preprovisioned the multirate PPM ( DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot, page 3-60), skip this step and continue with Step 8.
Step 8 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference - Control Link Oscillator) or InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete "DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services" task. Otherwise, continue with Step 9.
Step 9 Complete the "DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate" task to assign a line rate to a TXP or MXP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.)
Step 10 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the "DLP-G280 Delete a PPM" task.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Change the Card Mode as needed:
•FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1 only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
•Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and ONE_GE (Port 1-1 only), ESCON (Ports 5-1 through 8-1 only)
•ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards. The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards have two port mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode, all ports within the selected port group must have an OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second port group do not need to have an OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second port group.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 5-1.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task.
Table 5-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port 1-4 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 1-1 through 4-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
•FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
•FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
|
Port 5-8 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 5-1 through 8-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
•FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
•FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).
|
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the 10GE_XP or GE_XP card mode. 10GE_XP cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G Ethernet MXP.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 10GE_XP or GE_XP card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card Modes
Mode
|
Cards
|
Description
|
L2 over DWDM
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
|
Provisions the GE_XP or 10GE_XP as a Layer 2 switch.
|
10GE TXP
|
10GE_XP
|
Provisions the 10GE_XP as a 10GE transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port 1-1 is sent to 10GE trunk Port 3-1, and traffic received on 10GE client Port 2-1 is sent to 10GE trunk Port 4-1.
|
10GE MXP
|
GE_XP
|
Provisions the GE_XP as a 10GE muxponder. Traffic received on GE client Ports 1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10GE trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on GE client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10GE trunk Port 22-1.
|
20GE MXP
|
GE_XP
|
Provisions the GE_XP as a 20GE muxponder. Traffic received on GE client Ports 1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10GE trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
|
:
Step 6 Click Apply, then Yes on the confirmation dialog.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Purpose
|
This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
•PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
•PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
•Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
•Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down list.
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Purpose
|
This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the "DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot" task on page 3-60 this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, unassigned (ETSI) service state.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 If this is the first PPM provisioned for the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card, complete the following substeps. If a PPM has already been provisioned on the card, continue with Step 3.
a. Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
b. Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 3. If not, continue with Step c.
c. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
d. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 5 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
•PPM—Choose the slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
•PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 6 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 4 through 6. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Purpose
|
This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM ETR_CLO and ISC services.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Cisco MetroPlanner site plan
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco MetroPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service. The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
•Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards
–40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
Figure 5-1 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco MetroPlanner.
Figure 5-1 Single-Span Topology
•Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards
–40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating) sites cannot be installed. Figure 5-2 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in Cisco MetroPlanner.
Figure 5-2 Point-to-Point Topology
•Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C cards
–40-WSS-C and 40-DMX-C cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 5-3 shows two hub nodes with no line amplifier nodes installed. Figure 5-4 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
Figure 5-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 5-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task if the trunk port is out of service. If the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards. If the trunk port was in-service when you provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC-3 (all cards except the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 2.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the G.709 OTN field, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
•Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM. For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
•Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 5-3 for definitions of the supported rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card.
Step 5 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue if the SFP is not installed.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.
Table 5-3 PPM Port Types
Card
|
Port Type
|
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
|
•OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
•OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
•OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
•DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
•SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video signal type 1
•HDTV—High Definition Television
•PASS-THRU—Not specified
•FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
•FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
•FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
•FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
•ETR_CLO—External Time Reference-Control Link Oscillator
•ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
•ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
•OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
|
TXP_MR_10G2
|
•SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
|
•SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy—10 Gbps
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
•10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
|
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
If the card mode is FC_GE:
•FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
•FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
•FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port 1-1 only)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
•FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port1-1 only)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
|
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
|
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
•FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
•FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
•FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
•FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
|
•GE (GE_XP client ports)1
•10GE (10GE_XP client and trunk ports; GE_XP trunk ports)1
|
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete the "DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate" task.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card where you want to delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the Pluggable Ports area.
Note You cannot delete a client port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC) or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits, or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port (except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards. For more information about port states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 4 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
•In the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
•If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC. The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 5 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the "DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP" task on page 3-61.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports of two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards
Cisco MetroPlanner Traffic Matrix
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards, page 1-76
NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment, page 1-68
G46 Log into CTC
NTP-G139 Verify Cisco MetroPlanner Reports and Files, page 3-3
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards when they are provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned for the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards when they are provisioned in L2 over DWDM mode.
Note If you provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards, the Ethernet mode must be set to 10000 Mbps. To provision the Ethernet mode, see the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings" task.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco MetroPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 3-1 on page 3-3) for your site. Verify the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards that need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with "Y-Cable" in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco MetroPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 3-4 on page 3-90. Table 5-4 lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
Table 5-4 Protection Types
Type
|
Cards
|
Description and Installation Requirements
|
Y-cable
|
MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
|
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card/port with a protect transponder or muxponder card/port. The protect port must be on a different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port 2, etc.
|
Splitter
|
TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name.
|
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP cards where you will create the Y-cable protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the "DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot" task on page 3-60 or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the "DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP" task on page 3-61.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
•Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (") characters.
•Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
•Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list, as shown in Figure 5-5. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the "DLP-G353 Preprovision a Single Slot" task on page 3-48.
Figure 5-5 Creating a Y-Cable Protection Group
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
•Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional switching option is available only for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups. It is not available for Y-cable protection groups except for MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards that are provisioned for Fibre Channel with distance extension enabled.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco MetroPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
• G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
• G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
• G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
• G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
• G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
• G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-5.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Table 5-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation (option only supported for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
•Transparent
•Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (ETSI)
•Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (ETSI)
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
Sets the regeneration peer group name.
|
User defined
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Pluggable Port Rate, where Pluggable Port Rate is the pluggable port rate provisioned on the Pluggable Port Modules tab.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-6.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the "DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds" task.
Table 5-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
|
•Disabled (default)
•Auto Restart
•Manual Restart
•Manual Restart for Test
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
•Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
•SR
•SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
•IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
•IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
•LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
•LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
•LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this display updated automatically.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned.
|
C—Only the C band is available
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning. This field does not apply to TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards
|
—
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 5-9.
Note Some parameters and options in Table 5-9 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does not appear in CTC.
Table 5-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ANSI
|
Options - ETSI
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 5-10 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 5-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bDataOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 5-11 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Table 5-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface
|
Input Bit Rate
|
3R vs. 2R
|
ITU-T G.709
|
OC-48/STM-16
|
2.488 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
DV-6000
|
2.38 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON)
|
2.125 Gbps
|
3R1
|
On or Off
|
High-Definition Television (HDTV)
|
1.48 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
|
1.25 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-12/STM-4
|
622 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-3/STM-1
|
155 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON)
|
200 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
SDI/D1 video
|
270 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ISC-1 Compact
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
Off
|
ISC-3
|
1.06 or 2.125 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ETR_CLO
|
16 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Click the 15 Min performance monitoring (PM) interval radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 5-12, provision the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 5-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal
|
TCA RX Power Low
|
TCA RX Power High
|
3R
|
-23 dBm
|
-9 dBm
|
2R
|
-24 dBm
|
-9 dBm
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 9 Provision the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High to -7 dBm, and for RX Power Low to -26 dBm.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Under Types, click TCA, then click the 1 Day interval. Click Refresh, then repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the 1-day interval. If you have completed both intervals, continue with Step 12.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 5-13, provision the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 5-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
-23
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
-24
|
-10
|
-21
|
-2
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-28
|
-7
|
-21
|
-2
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-28
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-18
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-18
|
0
|
-11
|
6
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-18
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-18
|
0
|
-11
|
6
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-21
|
-14
|
-35
|
-8
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-28
|
-7
|
-21
|
-2
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-18
|
0
|
-11
|
6
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-28
|
-7
|
-21
|
-2
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-28
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-15
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 5-14, provision the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
-26
|
-5
|
-18
|
-5
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
-27
|
-7
|
-18
|
-5
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-31
|
-4
|
-18
|
-5
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-31
|
-5
|
-18
|
-5
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
3
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-24
|
-11
|
-32
|
-11
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-31
|
-4
|
-18
|
-5
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
3
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-31
|
-4
|
-18
|
-5
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-31
|
-5
|
-18
|
-5
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-15 through 5-18.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-15 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 5-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) The signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Table 5-16 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port1
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-17 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 5-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 5-18 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the "DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate" task. If not, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
• G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
• G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
• G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
• G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
• G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
• G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
•SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-19.
Table 5-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
•Transparent
•Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
•Line
|
•Transparent
•Regeneration Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
•Multiplex Section
|
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
•Squelch
•AIS
|
•Squelch
•AIS
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
(Display only) The regeneration peer group name.
|
—
|
—
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the TXP_MR_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
—
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when 10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-20.
Note In Table 5-20, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 5-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•1 (OC192) (if TXP_MR_10G)
•1 (Client) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned)
•1-1 (OC192)
•2 (Trunk)
|
•1 (STM-64) (if TXP_MR_10G)
•1 (Client) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned)
•1-1 (STM-64)
•2 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS
•IS,AINS
•OOS,DSBLD
•OOS,MT
|
•Unlocked
•Unlocked,automaticInService
•Locked,disabled
•Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR
•OOS-AU,AINS
•OOS-MA,DSBLD
•OOS-MA,MT
|
•Unlocked-enabled
•Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
•Locked-enabled,disabled
•Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
SF BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) The optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
(TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
(TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a do not use (DUS) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Max Size
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the maximum Ethernet packet size.
|
•1548 bytes
•Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
•1548 bytes
•Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
Incoming MAC Address
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the incoming MAC address.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or 10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-21.
Table 5-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
Options — ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1-1 (OC192)
•2—Trunk
|
•1-1 (STM64)
•2—Trunk
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 5-22.
Table 5-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 2 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. If the physical TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L is installed, this field is display-only.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to TXP_MR_10G or TXP_MR_10E cards.)
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads, including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-23.
Note Parameters shown in Table 5-23 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 5-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ANSI
|
Options - ETSI
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1-1 (OC192)
•2 (Trunk)
|
•1-1 (STM64)
•2 (Trunk)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet LAN payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 5-24 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 5-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
ifInFramingErrorPkts
|
Number of receive framing error counters.
|
ifInJunkInterPkts
|
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
ifOutMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
|
ifOutBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size permitted.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
etherStatsOctets
|
Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
|
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
rxPauseFrames
|
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
|
rxControlFrames
|
Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the MAC control sublayer.
|
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames
|
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode that is not supported by the device.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 5-25, provision the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 5-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-22 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
-1 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-26, provision the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-24 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 5-27, provision the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 5-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
-1
|
-11
|
5
|
-12
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
1
|
-14
|
5
|
-12
|
10G Ethernet WAN PHY
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
1
|
-14
|
5
|
-12
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
1
|
-14
|
5
|
-12
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-28, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
2
|
-14
|
2
|
-9
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
4
|
-17
|
2
|
-9
|
10G Ethernet WAN PHY
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
4
|
-17
|
2
|
-9
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
4
|
-17
|
2
|
-9
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-29 through 5-32.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-29 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 5-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC.
|
•Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC is on.
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only) Standard FEC is on.
•Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
•Asynch mapping
•Synch mapping
|
Table 5-30 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
ES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-31 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 5-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 5-32 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1
•2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Note The ADM-10G card is not supported on the SDH (ETSI) platform.
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the "DLP-G396 Change the ADM-10G Card Interlink Port Settings" task and then complete the "DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group" task.
Step 4 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
• G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
• G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
• G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET Payloads
• G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Step 5 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
• G400 Provision the ADM-10G Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G401 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G396 Change the ADM-10G Card Interlink Port Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the interlink port settings to enable peer grouping between two ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
NTP-G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, and ADM-10G Cards, page 3-56, for two ADM-10G cards (located on both sides of the same shelf or in different shelves) for which a peer group is needed.
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note You can perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; however, peer group communication is not enabled until you perform the task on two cards within the same node.
Note After you perform this task, you do not need to provision a separate circuit to carry the interlink. This operation is carried out as a background operation if the interlink is active and functional.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 In the Port column, locate the lines for Port 17-1 (Interlink) and Port 18-1 (Interlink).
Step 4 In the Admin State column, change the administrative state for Port 17-1 and Port 18-1 to IS, then click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 as needed for the other ADM-10G card that will be included in the peer group.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card can be accessed through the interlink ports.
Note You need only perform this task on one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs and the Ports, SONET, or SDH subtabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-33 as needed.
Note In Table 5-33, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 5-33 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•17 (Interlink)
•18 (Interlink)
•1-16, 19 (OC192)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS
•IS,AINS
•OOS,DSBLD
•OOS,MT
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR
•OOS-AU,AINS
•OOS-MA,DSBLD
•OOS-MA,MT
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(SONET [ANSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
Note: AINS is not supported on Interlink ports.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on Interlink ports.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Wavelength
|
Tunable Wavelength
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-8 are supported wavelengths.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-34 as needed.
Table 5-34 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the trunk port number.
|
19 (OC192)
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
Send DoNotUse
|
When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
Type of node (display only)
|
SONET or SDH
|
Admin SSM In
|
Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU.
|
· PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1)
· ST2—Stratum 2
· TNC—Transit node clock
· ST3E—Stratum 3E
· ST3—Stratum 3
· SMC—SONET minimum clock
· ST4—Stratum 4
· DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization
· RES—Reserved; quality level set by user
|
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the section trace settings. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-35.
Table 5-35 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1-1 to 16-1 (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48)
•19-1 (OC-192)
•2—Trunk
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
•64 byte
|
Current
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New Transmit String sets a new transmit string. Current String Type allows you to choose between ASCII or Hexadecimal format. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
Current Received String (display only) displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying SONET payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-36.
Table 5-36 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ANSI
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1-1 to 16-1 (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48)
•19-1 (OC-192)
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Purpose
|
This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 5-37 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 5-37 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error-free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame check sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted maximum size.
|
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode not supported by this device.
|
dot3InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot3OutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the ADM-10G trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 5-38, provision the trunk port (Port 19-1) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 5-38 ADM-10G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
19-1 (OC-192)
|
-7 dBm
|
-27 dBm
|
6.0 dBm
|
-4.0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-39, provision the trunk port (Port 19-1) alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-39 ADM-10G Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
19-1 (OC-192)
|
-5 dBm
|
-30 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
-3.0 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the interlink port alarm and TCA thresholds for the ADM-10G card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the interlink port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 5-13 and Table 5-14, provision the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-40 through 5-43.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-40 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 5-40 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
19-1
|
ITU-TG.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC.
|
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—Standard FEC is on.
•Enhanced—(Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
Synch mapping
|
Table 5-41 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-41 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
19-1
|
ES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-42 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 5-42 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
19-1
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 5-43 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-43 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
19 (Trunk)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Current Expected String displays the current expected string; New sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh (every 5 sec)
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
• G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
• G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
• G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
• G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
• G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
• G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 4 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards, including payload type, termination mode, and wavelength.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-44.
Note Parameters shown in Table 5-44 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 5-44 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. Options that do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on SONET/SDH multiplexing. The transparent mode terminates and rebuilds the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2 byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards are fully transparent in transparent mode based on the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an OTU2.
Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
For ANSI platforms:
•Transparent
•Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L only)
•Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
•Transparent
•Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G, only)
•Regeneration Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L only)
|
AIS/Squelch
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
•Ais
•Squelch
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-45.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services. Client ports will not appear of the pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
Sets the optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
•Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
•SR
•SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
•IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
•IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
•LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
•LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
•LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-46.
Table 5-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size. Select either radio button.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-47.
Table 5-47 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-48.
Table 5-48 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band available from the card that is installed. If the card is preprovisioned, the field can be provisioned to the band of the card that will be installed.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-49.
Note In Table 5-49, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 5-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ONS 15454
|
Options - ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 5-50, provision the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 5-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_LTrunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-22 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
-1 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-51, provision the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_LTrunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-24 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 5-52, provision the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 5-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-3
|
-18
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
0
|
-18
|
6
|
-11
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-3
|
-18
|
3
|
-16
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
0
|
-18
|
6
|
-11
|
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 5-53, provision the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 5-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
3
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
3
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, and MXP_2.5G_10E_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L card where you want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-54 through 5-57.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-54 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 5-54, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 5-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled or Enabled. With the MXP_2.5G_10E card, Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
|
•Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only) FEC is on.
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) FEC is on.
•Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The MXP_2.5G_10E can perform standard ODU multiplexing according to ITU-T G.709. The card uses this to aggregate the four OC-48 client signals.
|
•ODU Multiplex
|
Table 5-55 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
5 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-56 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 5-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Table 5-57 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number. The trail trace identifier is applicable only to the trunk interface, which handles ITU-T G.709 frames.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
• G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
• G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
• G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
• G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
• G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
• G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 5-58.
Table 5-58 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•1
•2
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
•Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
•SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Service tabs, where Service is the service type provisioned on the Pluggable Port Modules tab, such as SONET (ANSI), SDH (ETSI), 1G Ethernet, and others.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 5-59.
Table 5-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate with the Cisco Multilayer Director Switch (MDS) storage products.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Auto Detect Credits
|
Allows automatic detection of buffer credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Credits Available
|
(Display only) Displays the number of buffer credits available.
|
Numeric (range depends on the client equipment attached to the card)
|
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold
|
Allows the threshold of the generic framing procedure (GFP) buffer between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be automatically adjusted.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
GFP Buffers Available
|
Displays the number of GFP buffers available between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Numeric
|
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 5-60.
Table 5-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER1
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER 1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
•SONET (ANSI)
•SDH (ETSI)
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 5-61.
Table 5-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (trunk ports for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 5-62.
Table 5-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned.
|
C—Only the C band is available
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning. This field does not apply to MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards
|
—
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 5-63.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 5-63, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 5-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
•9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 5-64 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 5-64 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInDiscards
|
Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutDiscards
|
Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC) and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the maximum transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
fcStatsLinkRecoveries
|
Number of link recoveries.
|
fcStatsZeroTxCredits
|
Number of transmit attempts that failed because of unavailable credits.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Provision the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High to -9 dBm and for RX Power Low to -23 dBm.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Provision the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High to -7 dBm and for RX Power Low to -26 dBm.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 5-65, provision the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 5-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-15
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-21
|
-14
|
-32
|
-11
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-66, provision the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-24
|
-11
|
-35
|
-8
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
• G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
• G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
• G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
• G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
• G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
• G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
• G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
• G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 5-67.
Table 5-67 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Client Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
1 through 8
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Sets the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
•Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
•SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
|
Squelch
|
Shuts down the far-end laser in response to certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.)
|
•Squelch
•Disable
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre Channel or FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port (Port 9).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 5-68.
Table 5-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Up to eight ports might appear based on the number of pluggable port modules that are provisioned.
|
—
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage products.
|
•Checked—Distance extension is enabled.
•Unchecked—Distance extension is not enabled.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 5-69.
Table 5-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 9 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. The field is display-only when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the card is provisioned in CTC only, you can provision the band for the card that will be installed.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning.
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 5-70.
Table 5-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER1
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER 1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
•SONET (ANSI)
•SDH (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 5-71.
Table 5-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•9 (trunk only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 5-72.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 5-72, some parameters and options do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 5-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ONS 15454
|
Options - ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•9 (Trunk)
|
•9 (Trunk)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example "1-1 (ONE_GE)", or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 5-73 for a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 5-74 for a list of FC and FICON variables, and Table 5-75 for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables.
Table 5-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 5-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutOversizePkts
|
Total number of oversized packets output from the interface.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
fcStatsZeroTxCredits
|
This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
|
fcStatsRxRecvrReady
|
Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
fcStatsTxRecvrReady
|
Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received
|
Table 5-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Provision the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds as follows:
•RX Power High: -9 dBm
•RX Power Low: -18 dBm
•TX Power High: 9 dBm
•TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Provision the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds as follows:
•RX Power High: -8 dBm
•RX Power Low: -20 dBm
•TX Power High: 7 dBm
•TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 5-76, provision the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 5-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-15
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
0
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
-12
|
4
|
-15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-1
|
-15
|
4
|
-15
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
-12
|
4
|
-15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-1
|
-15
|
4
|
-15
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 5-77, provision the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
-15
|
3
|
-11
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-18
|
2
|
-11
|
0
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
-15
|
3
|
-11
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-18
|
2
|
-11
|
0
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-78 through 5-81.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-78 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 5-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
•Standard
•Enhanced
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
•Asynch mapping
•Synch mapping
|
Table 5-79 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port1
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 5-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 5-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure on page 13-2 to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
–L2 over DWDM (GE_XP or 10GE_XP)
–10GE TXP (10GE_XP only)
–10GE MXP (GE_XP only)
–20GE MXP (GE_XP only)
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task.
Step 4 Complete the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings" task.
Step 5 If the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode is L2 over DWDM, complete the following tasks, as needed. If the card mode is not L2 over DWDM, continue with Step 6.
• G381 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Layer 2 Protection Settings
• G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
• G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ports
• G383 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Quality of Service Settings
• G384 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP QinQ Settings
• G385 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP MAC Filter Settings
Step 6 Complete the following tasks, as needed.
• G386 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G387 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
• G388 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP RMON Thresholds
• G389 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Optical Transport Network Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the Ethernet settings for the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 5-82. The parameters that appear depend on the card mode.
Table 5-82 10GE_XP or GE_XP Ethernet Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Card Mode
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (n-n) and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE TXP
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
—
|
MTU
|
The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE TXP
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
Numeric. Default: 1548
Range 64 to 9216 (jumbo frame)
|
Mode
|
Sets the Ethernet mode.
Note: For GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards that are in Y-cable protection groups, Mode must be set to 10000 Mbps.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE TXP
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
•Auto (default)
•1000 Mbps
•10000 Mbps
|
Flow Control
|
Enables/disables flow control messaging with its peer port. When enabled, the port can send and receive PAUSE frames when buffer congestion occurs.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
•ON—flow control is enabled.
•OFF (default)—flow control is disabled
|
Committed Info Rate
|
Sets the guaranteed information rate as provided by the service provider service-level agreement.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
|
Committed Burst Size
|
Sets the maximum number of bits that will be transferred per second.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
•None
•4k (default)
•8k
•16k
•32k
•64k
•128k
•256k
•512k
•1MB
•2MB
•8MB
•16MB
|
Excess Burst Size
|
The maximum number of bits that are credited for later transfer in the event the committed burst rate cannot be transmitted.
|
•L2 over DWDM
•10GE MXP
•20GE MXP
|
•None
•4k (default)
•8k
•16k
•32k
•64k
•128k
•256k
•512k
•1MB
•2MB
•8MB
•16MB
|
NIM
|
Sets the port network interface mode (NIM). This parameter classifies port types designed for the Metro Ethernet market to simplify deployment, management, and troubleshooting.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
•UNI Mode—provisions the port as a user-to-network interface (UNI). This is the interface that faces the subscriber.
•NNI Mode—provisions the port as a network-to-network interface. This is the interface that faces the service provider network.
|
Egress QoS
|
Enables Quality of Service (QoS) on the port's egress or output queues.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
•Checked—QoS is enabled on the port's egress queues.
•Unchecked—(default) QoS is disabled on the port's egress queues.
|
MAC Learning
|
Enables or disables MAC learning for the port. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right location. Layer 2 switches, including the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards in L2 over DWDM mode, maintain a MAC learning table that associates the MAC addresses and VLANs with a given port.
Note MAC address table aging is 300 seconds. It cannot be changed.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
•Checked—MAC learning is enabled for this port.
•Unchecked—(default) MAC learning is disabled.
|
Ingress CoS
|
Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress Class of Service (CoS). The CoS.1p bits set the Ethernet frame priority.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
•0—(default) Sends CoS values 1 through 7 to the priority queue. In other words, frames with CoS settings 1 through 7 have higher priority. 0 is the lowest CoS priority.
•1—Sends CoS values 2 through 7 to the priority queue.
•2—Sends CoS values 3 through 7 to the priority queue.
•3—Sends CoS values 4 through 7 to the priority queue.
•4—Sends CoS values 5 through 7 to the priority queue.
•5—Sends CoS values 6 and 7 to the priority queue.
•6—Sends CoS value 7 to the priority queue.
•7—Sends no CoS values to the priority queue. 7 is the highest CoS priority.
|
Inner Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype field indicates which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.
The inner Ethertype applies to ports provisioned in UNI mode only. It does not apply to ports provisioned as NNI mode. The ports must be OOS before the inner Ethertype can be provisioned.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
Numeric. Default: 8100 (IEEE Std 802.1Q customer VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xfff.
|
Outer Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype field identifies which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.
|
L2 over DWDM
|
Numeric. Default: 8100 (IEEE 802.1Q customer VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xfff
|
Table 5-82 shows the inner and outer Ethertype behavior based on the NIM setting (either NNI mode or UNI mode). When the NIM is set to UNI, and the QinQ mode is set to Selective, the Ethertype behavior depends on the SVLAN/CVLAN operation that is provisioned, either Add or Translate. (QinQ parameters are provisioned in "DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP QinQ Settings" task.)
Note The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be configured based on the expected packet size to ensure that no packets are dropped when Flow Control is enabled. For example, if the CIR is 40% and packet size is 1 KB, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size should be set to 1 MB.
Table 5-83 Ethertype Behavior
Port Type/
Ethertype
|
NNI Mode
|
UNI Mode
|
Mode: Transparent
|
Mode: Selective
Operation: Add
|
Mode: Selective
Operation: Translate
|
Inner Ethertype
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype value is used.
|
Not applicable: all packets are mapped over the SVLAN.
|
Working (card-based)
|
Working (card-based)
|
Outer Ethertype
|
Working (per port)
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype is contained in the inner VLAN (same as UNI Selective mode).
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype is the one contained in the inner VLAN.
|
This cannot be set by port, only by card. The outer Ethertype is automatically set to the inner Ethertype.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Layer 2 Protection Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the Layer 2 protection settings for the 10GE_XP or GE_XP cards when the cards are provisioned in L2 over DWDM mode.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode must be L2 over DWDM. To change the card mode, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task.
Note GE_XP or 10GE_XP Layer 2 protection settings must be planned for the entire VLAN ring. One card in the ring is provisioned as the master card and one port is set to Blocking. The master card coordinates the protection switching for the GE_XP or 10GE_XP VLAN ring.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the protection settings. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 3 In the Status column, modify the port protection status by clicking the appropriate table cell and choosing one of the following from the drop-down list:
•Forwarding—Forwards the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
•Blocking—Blocks the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
Note One port within a VLAN ring must be set to Blocking. All other ports must be set to Forwarding.
Step 4 Check the Master checkbox if you want the card to serve as the protection coordinator for the VLAN ring. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 From the Protection drop-down list, choose one of the following:
•Enabled—Enables protection.
•Disabled—Disables protection
•Forced—Forces the protection.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ports
Purpose
|
This task adds or removes service provider VLAN (SVLAN) provisioning to/from GE_XP and 10GE_XP ports. This task only applies to GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards in L2 over DWDM mode.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode must be in L2 over DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task.
Note This task can only be performed on ports provisioned as NNI. See the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings" task.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the SVLAN port settings. The card view opens.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > SVLAN tabs.
Step 3 For each SVLAN shown in the table, click the checkbox under the Port [port name] table cell to include the SVLAN in that port. If you do not want the SVLAN included, uncheck the checkbox.
Note If no SVLANs appear in the SVLAN tab, complete the "DLP-G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database" task.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Quality of Service Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) value and bandwidth for QoS Class of Service (CoS) egress queues on a GE_XP and 10GE_XP card port.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode must be L2 over DWDM and the port must have QoS enabled. Refer to the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task and the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings" task, if needed.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 10GE_XP or GE_XP card where you want to change the QoS settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > QoS tabs.
Step 3 In the Port field at the bottom of the window, choose the port where you want to provision the QoS settings.
Step 4 For each CoS egress queue, 0 through 7, define the following:
•WRR weight—sets the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) level for the CoS egress queue. The default is 1. The range is 0 to 15, where 0 is Strict Priority.)
Note The GE_XP and 10GE_XP define a set of eight queues, one queue for each CoS. Only one of the queues can be assigned the 0 WRR weight (Strict Priority).
•Bandwidth—sets the bandwidth allocated for the CoS egress queue. 100 is the default.
Step 5 Click Apply. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP QinQ Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the IEEE 802.1QinQ VLAN tags on the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card UNI ports. QinQ tags expand the VLAN capability by tagging the tagged packets to produce a "double-tagged" Ethernet frame. For service providers the expanded VLAN allows specific services to be provided on specific VLANs for specific customers, while other types of services can be provided to other customers on other VLANs.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode must be L2 over DWDM. To change the card mode, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task.
Note This task can only be performed on the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card UNI ports. (To provision the port Ethernet parameters, see the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet Settings" task.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 10GE_XP or GE_XP card where you want to change the QinQ settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > QinQ tabs.
Step 3 Click the Port field and choose the port where you want to provision QinQ.
Step 4 Click the Mode field and choose one of the following modes from the drop-down list:
•Selective—The incoming Ethernet packet is checked against the CVLAN and SVLAN table. If the CVLAN is not found, the packed is dropped.
•Transparent—All incoming packets are transported with the additional VLAN chosen in the SVLAN field.
Step 5 Click the BPDU field and choose one of the following bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) modes from the drop-down list:
•Drop (default)—If checked, drops incoming packets with any of the following destination MAC addresses:
–01-80-c2-00-00-00—IEEE 802.1D
–01-80-c2-00-00-02—Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
–01-80-0c-cc-cc-cc—VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
–01-00-c-cc-cc-cc—Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) type 0x2000, VLAN Trunk Protocol (VTP) type 0x2003, Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), type 0x0104, Uni-Directional Link Detection (UDLD) type 0x111, Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) type 0x2004
•Tunnel—If checked, transparently sends any of the destination MAC addresses listed above.
Step 6 If the Mode was set to Selective, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. To add a row, click Add.
b. Click the CVLAN table and type in the CVLAN range. You can enter a single value or a range using "-" between the two ends of the range.
c. Click the SVLAN table cell and choose an SVLAN from the drop-down list.
d. Click the Operation table cell and choose an operation:
–Add—Adds the SVLAN on top of the CVLAN.
–Translate—The CVLAN is translated with the SVLAN value.
Note A CVLAN with a value of 0 means "untagged packet.
Note Two or more CVLANs cannot be translated over the same SVLAN.
e. Click Apply.
f. Continue with Step 8.
Step 7 If the Mode was set to Transparent, in the SVLAN field, choose the SVLAN to be added to incoming packets.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G385 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP MAC Filter Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the MAC address filter for the GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards when the cards are provisioned in L2 over DWDM mode. The MAC address filter is a list of MAC addresses whose packets should be accepted or dropped.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card mode must be L2 over DWDM. To change the card mode, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Mode" task.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the MAC filter settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Security > MAC Filter tabs.
Step 3 Click the port for which you want to create a MAC filter.
Step 4 Click Edit.
Step 5 In the Edit MAC Address dialog box, click Add. A new table entry appears with the MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Step 6 In the MAC Address Port field, type in the MAC address you want to filter over the default 00-00-00-00-00-00 address.
Step 7 If you want to add more MAC addresses, repeat Steps 5 and 6. (Up to eight MAC addresses can be added for each port.) If not, click OK.
Step 8 On the MAC Filter table, provision the Allowed checkbox:
•Checked—All MAC addresses different from the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
•Unchecked—All MAC addresses matching the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 3 and 9 for each port of the GE_XP or 10GE_XP that you want to set up.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G386 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP or 10GE_XP trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP trunk ports are 21-1 and 22-1 on the card graphic and 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP card trunk ports are 3-1 and 4-1 on the card graphic and 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP and 10GE_XP card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Provision the trunk port TCA thresholds as shown in Table 5-84.
Table 5-84 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card Trunk Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
XFP WDM no FEC
|
-7
|
-23
|
6
|
-4
|
XFP WDM standard FEC
|
-7
|
-27
|
6
|
-4
|
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC
|
-7
|
-27
|
6
|
-4
|
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Provision the trunk port alarm thresholds as shown in Table 5-85.
Table 5-85 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card Trunk Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
XFP WDM no FEC
|
-5
|
-26
|
5
|
-3
|
XFP WDM standard FEC
|
-5
|
-30
|
5
|
-3
|
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC
|
-5
|
-30
|
5
|
-3
|
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to provision the second trunk port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G387 Provision the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The GE_XP card has two client ports. The ports are 1-1 and 2-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client) and 2 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP card has 20 client ports. The ports are 1-1 through 20-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client) through 20 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Provision the first client port TCA thresholds as shown in Table 5-86.
Table 5-86 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR
|
1
|
-14
|
5
|
-12
|
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)1
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
1000Base-LX 1
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Provision the client port Alarm thresholds as shown in Table 5-87.
Table 5-87 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR
|
3
|
-16
|
1
|
-8
|
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)1
|
3
|
-20
|
-2
|
-12
|
1000Base-SX (2Gbps)1
|
3
|
-18
|
-2
|
-12
|
1000Base-LX 1
|
0
|
-23
|
-1
|
-12
|
Step 7 You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP RMON Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card RMON threshold settings.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the RMON thresholds.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose an individual port, or choose All to provision RMON thresholds for all ports.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 5-88 for a list of available Ethernet RMON variables.
Note Variable descriptions were obtained from the following Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Requests for Comment (RFCs): RFC 3635, RFC 2233, and RFC 1757. Refer to the RFCs for additional information.
Table 5-88 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Ethernet RMON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInUcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
ifInDiscards
|
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutUcastPkts
|
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
ifOutMulticastPkts
|
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and functional addresses.
|
ifOutBroadcastPkts
|
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
ifOutDiscards
|
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
|
dot33StatsFCSErrors
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
|
dot33StatsFrameTooLong
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
|
dot33ControlInUnknownOpCode
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode that is not supported by this device.
|
dot33InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot33OutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral.
|
etherStatsPkts
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets,broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1519to1522Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
|
etherStatsOctets
|
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds. If not, continue with Step 12
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G389 Change the GE_XP and 10GE_XP Optical Transport Network Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the optical transport network (OTN) settings for the GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 5-89 through 5-92.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 5-89 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 5-89 GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk): 10GE_XP cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk): GE_XC cards
|
—
|
ITU-T G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
•Standard
•Enhanced
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Table 5-90 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 5-90 GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk): 10GE_XP cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk): GE_XC cards
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
Table 5-91 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 5-91 GE_XP and 10GE_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk): 10GE_XP cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk): GE_XC cards
|
—
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 5-92 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 5-92 GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the ALS maintenance settings for the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, and 10GE_XP cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function is normally disabled for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, and 10GE_XP cards. Enable ALS only when the cards are directly connected to each other.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, or 10GE_XP card where you want to change the ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance > ALS tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 5-93. The provisionable parameters are listed in the Options column in the table.
Table 5-93 ALS Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
ALS Mode
|
Automatic laser shutdown. ALS provides the ability to shut down the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, and 10GE_XP TX laser when the card detects an LOS.
|
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
•Disable—Deactivates ALS.
•Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is active. The power is automatically shut down when needed and automatically tries to restart using a probe pulse until the cause of the failure is repaired.
•Manual Restart
•Manual Restart for Test
|
Recovery Pulse Duration
|
(Display only) Displays the duration of the optical power pulse that begins when an amplifier restarts.
|
—
|
Recovery Pulse Interval
|
(Display only) Displays the interval between optical power pulses.
|
—
|
Currently Shutdown
|
(Display only) Displays the current status of the laser.
|
—
|
Request Laser Restart
|
If checked, allows you to restart the laser for maintenance.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click Apply. If the change affects traffic, a warning message displays. Click Yes to complete the change.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update
Purpose
|
This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise continue with Step 5 to force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window on the TCC.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card to be upgraded.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Disabled (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 7 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 8 Change the Card Mode as needed:
•FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
•FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Step 9 Click the Force FPGA Update button. This upgrades the FPGA image in the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, as appropriate. The MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card reboots and the FPGA now contains the updated image.
Step 10 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update when the Card is part of a Protection Group
Purpose
|
This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards when the card is part of a protection group.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This procedure applies to a near-end node that has two MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, one card acting as the working card and the other as the protect card. The far-end node has a similar configuration. The near-end working card trunk port is connected to the far-end working card trunk port. The near-end protect card trunk port is connected to the far-end protect card trunk port.
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise, continue with Step 5 to force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window on the TCC.
Step 5 Ensure traffic is running on the near-end and far-end working cards for each protection group on the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 6 In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection tab.
Step 7 For each protection group, verify that the working card client port is reported as working/active and the protect card cient port is reported as protect/standby.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for the far-end node.
Step 9 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "DLP-G182 Apply a Lockout" task on page 10-45 to prevent traffic from switching to the protect card.
Step 10 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "G192 Force FPGA Update" procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the protect card.
Step 11 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "DLP-G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout" task on page 10-46 to remove a lockout and return a protection group to its usual switching method.
Step 12 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "DLP-G179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch" task on page 10-43 to move traffic from the working to the protect card.
Step 13 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "G192 Force FPGA Update" procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the working card.
Step 14 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the "DLP-G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch" task on page 10-44 to clear a Force protection switch on the working card. If the protection group is revertive, this operation causes the traffic to revert to the working card. If the protection group is non-revertive, this operation causes the traffic to remain on the protect card.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
